1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2001–2040 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Cream metal barn with cupola, crossbuck doors and side porch in a mountain valley

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×20Man Cave / Hobby Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 25×20 man cave / hobby garage fits 25-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size. One project.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / Hobby Garage·Size25×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×20
25×20
this size
$7,400
25×25
longer
$7,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 9′ Legs
  • French Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X20-MAN-CAVE-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

25 feet wide × 20 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Our 25×20 man cave / hobby garage fits 25-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools25′ × 20′ · 500 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size.

💡 Pro tip:French Door. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / hobby garage
Everyday man cave / hobby garage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
man cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×20 man cave / hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×20?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 20′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×20

Two-Car Garage

25×20 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×20

Detached Workshop

25×20 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×20

RV Cover / Carport

25×20 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×20

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×20 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×20

She Shed / Studio

25×20 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×20

Contractor Shop

25×20 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🌾 25×20

Equipment Storage

25×20 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×20

Garage with Lean-To

25×20 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×20

Pop-Up Storefront

25×20 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×20

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×20 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×20

Community / Church Storage

25×20 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage cost?

A 25×20 man cave / hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×20 man cave / hobby garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×20 man cave / hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×20 man cave / hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×20 man cave / hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×20 man cave / hobby garage typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal barn with cupola, crossbuck doors and side porch in a mountain valley

25×20 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

25×20 Equipment Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×20 Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,050

12

25×20 Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,200$8,050SAVE $1,150
or $168/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×20Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×20 Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 25×20 equipment storage fits 25-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage·Size25×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,050$9,200Save $1,150
or as low as $168/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×20
25×20
this size
$8,050
25×25
longer
$8,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • Open Front
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X20-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment storage layout.

25 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 25×20 equipment storage fits 25-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack25′ × 20′ · 500 sq ft · equipment storage layout

Equipment Storage layout.

Our 25×20 equipment storage fits 25-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall. The 12-foot peak clears a tractor with a roll bar and front-end loader. Gravel floor with auger ground anchors keeps the install cost low.

💡 Pro tip:Ground Anchors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×20 Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage
Everyday equipment storage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage + seasonal storage
equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×20 Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$168/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×20 equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $168/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×20?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 20′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×20 Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×20 Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×20

Two-Car Garage

25×20 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×20

Detached Workshop

25×20 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×20

RV Cover / Carport

25×20 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×20

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×20 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×20

She Shed / Studio

25×20 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×20

Contractor Shop

25×20 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×20

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×20 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🏡 25×20

Garage with Lean-To

25×20 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×20

Pop-Up Storefront

25×20 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×20

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×20 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×20

Community / Church Storage

25×20 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×20 equipment storage cost?

A 25×20 equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $168/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×20 equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×20 equipment storage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×20 equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×20 equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×20 equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $168/month on a 25×20 equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×20 equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×20 equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×20 equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and attached lean to equipment shelter

25×20 Equipment Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Wood tone metal carport with open drive-through bay beside a fenced pasture, steel carport framing

25×20 Garage with Lean-To

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×20 Garage with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

25×20 Garage with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×20Garage with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×20 Garage with Lean-To, built for daily backyard use.

25×20 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday garage with lean-to space. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships pre-engineered as one unit. Total covered footprint: 500 sq ft.

You’re viewing:Garage with Lean-To·Size25×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×20
25×20
this size
$7,400
25×25
longer
$7,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 10′ Lean-To
  • 10′ Legs
  • Combo Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X20-GARAGE-LEAN-TOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

25 feet wide × 20 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. 25×20 delivers 500 sq ft of everyday garage with lean-to space.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools25′ × 20′ · 500 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships pre-engineered as one unit.

💡 Pro tip:Combo Build. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×20 Garage with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width25′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with lean-to
Everyday garage with lean-to
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with lean-to + seasonal storage
garage with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×20 Garage with Lean-To, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×20 garage with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×20?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 20′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×20 Garage with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×20 Garage with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 25×20

Two-Car Garage

25×20 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×20

Detached Workshop

25×20 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×20

RV Cover / Carport

25×20 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×20

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×20 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×20

She Shed / Studio

25×20 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×20

Contractor Shop

25×20 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×20

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×20 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×20

Equipment Storage

25×20 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏢 25×20

Pop-Up Storefront

25×20 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×20

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×20 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×20

Community / Church Storage

25×20 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 25×20 garage with lean-to cost?

A 25×20 garage with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×20 garage with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×20 garage with lean-to?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×20 garage with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×20 garage with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×20 garage with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 25×20 garage with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 25×20 garage with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×20 garage with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×20 garage with lean-to add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×20 garage with lean-to typically adds $4,000–$6,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Wood tone metal carport with open drive-through bay beside a fenced pasture, steel carport framing

25×20 Garage with Lean-To

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Yellow metal building with raised gray clerestory windows and white roll-up door near boat docks

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $7,400

12

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,450$7,400SAVE $1,050
or $154/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×20Boat & Trailer Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 25×20 boat & trailer cover packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside.

You’re viewing:Boat & Trailer Cover·Size25×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,400$8,450Save $1,050
or as low as $154/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×20
25×20
this size
$7,400
25×25
longer
$7,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • 12′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X20-BOAT-TRAILER-COVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

25 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 25×20 boat & trailer cover packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Boat + trailerDaily driverOutboard / rinse25′ × 20′ · 500 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall.

💡 Pro tip:4:12 Pitch.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width25′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer cover
Everyday boat & trailer cover
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
boat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$154/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×20 boat & trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $154/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×20?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 20′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 25×20

Two-Car Garage

25×20 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×20

Detached Workshop

25×20 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×20

RV Cover / Carport

25×20 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×20

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×20 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×20

She Shed / Studio

25×20 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×20

Contractor Shop

25×20 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×20

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×20 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×20

Equipment Storage

25×20 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×20

Garage with Lean-To

25×20 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×20

Pop-Up Storefront

25×20 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🏛️ 25×20

Community / Church Storage

25×20 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 25×20 boat & trailer cover cost?

A 25×20 boat & trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $7,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $154/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×20 boat & trailer cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×20 boat & trailer cover?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×20 boat & trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×20 boat & trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×20 boat & trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $154/month on a 25×20 boat & trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 25×20 boat & trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×20 boat & trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×20 boat & trailer cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Yellow metal building with raised gray clerestory windows and white roll-up door near boat docks

25×20 Boat & Trailer Cover

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Side elevation of a charcoal commercial metal building church lined with arched stained glass windows

25×20 Community / Church Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×20 Community / Church Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,350

12

25×20 Community / Church Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,650$9,350SAVE $1,300
or $195/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×20Community / Church Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×20 Community / Church Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 25×20 community / church storage packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 500 sq ft for folding-table.

You’re viewing:Community / Church Storage·Size25×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,350$10,650Save $1,300
or as low as $195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×20
25×20
this size
$9,350
25×25
longer
$9,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 500 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume
  • 9′ Legs
  • Drive-Through
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X20-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chapel layout.

25 feet wide × 20 feet long. Intimate sanctuary, single-aisle layout. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 25×20 community / church storage packs 500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Altar / pulpitPew areaFOYER25′ × 20′ · 500 sq ft · chapel layout

Altar / pulpit · Pew area · Foyer

Altar / pulpit at the front, pew area in the middle, foyer at the rear. Capacity: seats ~50. Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 500 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: choir stand, narthex.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×20 Community / Church Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Church Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Church Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Church Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / church storage
Everyday community / church storage
500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / church storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / church storage + seasonal storage
community / church storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×20 Community / Church Storage, what makes it different.

500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×20 community / church storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×20?

500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 20′ footprint with 500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,000–$6,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Church Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×20 Community / Church Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×20 Community / Church Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Church Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Church Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×20

Two-Car Garage

25×20 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×20

Detached Workshop

25×20 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×20

RV Cover / Carport

25×20 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×20

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×20 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×20

She Shed / Studio

25×20 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×20

Contractor Shop

25×20 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×20

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×20 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×20

Equipment Storage

25×20 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×20

Garage with Lean-To

25×20 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×20

Pop-Up Storefront

25×20 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×20

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×20 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Church Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×20 community / church storage cost?

A 25×20 community / church storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×20 community / church storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / church storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×20 community / church storage?

Almost always for 500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / church storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×20 community / church storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×20 community / church storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×20 community / church storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $195/month on a 25×20 community / church storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×20 community / church storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×20 community / church storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×20 community / church storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Church Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Side elevation of a charcoal commercial metal building church lined with arched stained glass windows

25×20 Community / Church Storage

500 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×20 steel building delivers 500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue metal garage with black windowed door beside flower beds and a country pond

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $19,000

12

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,650$19,000SAVE $2,650
or $396/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Four-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 25×60 four-car detached garage? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. The 60-foot depth means you can pull two trucks deep on each side and still have wall.

You’re viewing:Four-Car Detached Garage·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,000$21,650Save $2,650
or as low as $396/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two 10×8 Roll-Ups
  • 10′ Walls
  • Free Install Included
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-FOUR-CAR-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 25×60 four-car detached garage? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 60-foot depth means you can pull two trucks deep on each side and still have wall space for a tool wall.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install Included. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Four-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Four-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Four-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday four-car detached garage
Everyday four-car detached garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a four-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfour-car detached garage + seasonal storage
four-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$396/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 four-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $396/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Four-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Four-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Four-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Four-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 four-car detached garage cost?

A 25×60 four-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $396/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 four-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud four-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 four-car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud four-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 four-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 four-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 four-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $396/month on a 25×60 four-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 four-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 four-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×60 four-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×60 four-car detached garage typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Four-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue metal garage with black windowed door beside flower beds and a country pond

25×60 Four-Car Detached Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building with brown trim and lean-to carport covering motorhome and UTV

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover | Steel and Stud, From $19,000

12

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,650$19,000SAVE $2,650
or $396/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60RV + Boat Combo Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. RV owners and weekend boaters love this footprint because a 40-foot Class A coach parks in.

You’re viewing:RV + Boat Combo Cover·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,000$21,650Save $2,650
or as low as $396/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Walls
  • 12×14 Roll-Up
  • Hail-Rated Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-RV-BOAT-COMBO-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Looking for a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. RV owners and weekend boaters love this footprint because a 40-foot Class A coach parks in front with a 20-foot bass boat behind it on the same bay.

💡 Pro tip:Hail-Rated Panels. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV + Boat Combo Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV + Boat Combo Cover spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV + Boat Combo Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday rv + boat combo cover
Everyday rv + boat combo cover
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv + boat combo cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv + boat combo cover + seasonal storage
rv + boat combo cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$396/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 rv + boat combo cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $396/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV + Boat Combo Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV + Boat Combo Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV + Boat Combo Cover also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV + Boat Combo Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover cost?

A 25×60 rv + boat combo cover from Steel and Stud starts at $19,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $396/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 rv + boat combo cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv + boat combo cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv + boat combo cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $396/month on a 25×60 rv + boat combo cover.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 rv + boat combo cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 rv + boat combo cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×60 rv + boat combo cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv + boat combo cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV + Boat Combo Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building with brown trim and lean-to carport covering motorhome and UTV

25×60 RV + Boat Combo Cover

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel barn with three stall doors and a horse standing in desert mountain scenery

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls | Steel and Stud, From $19,650

12

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,400$19,650SAVE $2,750
or $409/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Horse Barn with Stalls

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls, built for farm and ranch demands.

25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of rugged horse barn with stalls space. The 25×60 stall layout fits cleanly under 24-foot trusses, and sliding barn doors at both ends keep airflow moving. Add a lean-to for a covered grooming.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn with Stalls·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,650$22,400Save $2,750
or as low as $409/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Stalls
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-HORSE-BARN-STALLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. 25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of rugged horse barn with stalls space.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed. The 25×60 stall layout fits cleanly under 24-foot trusses, and sliding barn doors at both ends keep airflow moving.

💡 Pro tip:Lean-To Add-On. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn with Stalls.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn with Stalls spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn with Stalls.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn with stalls
Everyday horse barn with stalls
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn with stalls.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
horse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$409/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 horse barn with stalls is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $409/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn with Stalls shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn with Stalls · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn with Stalls also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn with Stalls questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 horse barn with stalls cost?

A 25×60 horse barn with stalls from Steel and Stud starts at $19,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $409/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 horse barn with stalls price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 horse barn with stalls?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 horse barn with stalls need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 horse barn with stalls delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 horse barn with stalls without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $409/month on a 25×60 horse barn with stalls.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 horse barn with stalls?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 horse barn with stalls in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×60 horse barn with stalls stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn with Stalls quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel barn with three stall doors and a horse standing in desert mountain scenery

25×60 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building styled as a cabin with front porch and desert landscaping

25×60 Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud, From $19,000

12

25×60 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,650$19,000SAVE $2,650
or $396/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Barndominium Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Our 25×60 barndominium shell fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. The 1,1500 sq ft 25×60 is the most-quoted footprint for barndominium shells. Big.

You’re viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,000$21,650Save $2,650
or as low as $396/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 25×60 barndominium shell fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Bedroom(s)Great room / KitchenBath / Mech25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. The 1,1500 sq ft 25×60 is the most-quoted footprint for barndominium shells.

💡 Pro tip:Pre-Framed Openings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Barndominium Shell, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$396/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $396/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 barndominium shell cost?

A 25×60 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $19,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $396/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 barndominium shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $396/month on a 25×60 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×60 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×60 barndominium shell typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building styled as a cabin with front porch and desert landscaping

25×60 Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage | Steel and Stud, From $20,850

12

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Contractor Workshop & Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of code-compliant contractor workshop & storage space. Tradespeople running roofing, HVAC, or plumbing crews use the 25×60 as a yard workshop. One bay holds the work truck, one bay holds the.

You’re viewing:Contractor Workshop & Storage·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two 10×10 Roll-Ups
  • Office Partition
  • 14-GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of code-compliant contractor workshop & storage space.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Tradespeople running roofing, HVAC, or plumbing crews use the 25×60 as a yard workshop.

💡 Pro tip:14-GA Standard. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop & Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop & Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop & Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop & storage
Everyday contractor workshop & storage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop & storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop & storage + seasonal storage
contractor workshop & storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 contractor workshop & storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop & Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Workshop & Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop & Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop & Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage cost?

A 25×60 contractor workshop & storage from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 contractor workshop & storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor workshop & storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop & storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×60 contractor workshop & storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 contractor workshop & storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 contractor workshop & storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×60 contractor workshop & storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop & Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel garage at twilight with closed roll-up door and a lit side window

25×60 Contractor Workshop & Storage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building hay barn at sunset with red tractor loading round bale

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $19,650

12

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,400$19,650SAVE $2,750
or $409/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Hay & Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of rugged hay & equipment barn space. Rural property owners stack round bales four high under a 14-foot leg height while keeping a tractor and bush hog under the same roof. Open one gable end.

You’re viewing:Hay & Equipment Barn·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,650$22,400Save $2,750
or as low as $409/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Walls
  • Open Gable End
  • 30 PSF Snow Load
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-HAY-EQUIPMENT-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. 25×60 delivers 1500 sq ft of rugged hay & equipment barn space.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Rural property owners stack round bales four high under a 14-foot leg height while keeping a tractor and bush hog under the same roof.

💡 Pro tip:30 PSF Snow Load.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & equipment barn
Everyday hay & equipment barn
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay & equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$409/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 hay & equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $409/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 hay & equipment barn cost?

A 25×60 hay & equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $19,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $409/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 hay & equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 hay & equipment barn?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 hay & equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 hay & equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 hay & equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $409/month on a 25×60 hay & equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 hay & equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 hay & equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×60 hay & equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building hay barn at sunset with red tractor loading round bale

25×60 Hay & Equipment Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal barn with cupola, cream sectional door and stone accents among autumn trees

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage | Steel and Stud, From $19,000

12

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,650$19,000SAVE $2,650
or $396/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Man Cave & Restoration Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 25×60 man cave & restoration garage packs 1500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Restorers and gearheads divide the 60-foot length into a clean front lounge and.

You’re viewing:Man Cave & Restoration Garage·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,000$21,650Save $2,650
or as low as $396/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Storefront Window
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-MAN-CAVE-RESTORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 25×60 man cave & restoration garage packs 1500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Restorers and gearheads divide the 60-foot length into a clean front lounge and a working rear bay.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Split Ready. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave & Restoration Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave & Restoration Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave & Restoration Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave & restoration garage
Everyday man cave & restoration garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave & restoration garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave & restoration garage + seasonal storage
man cave & restoration garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$396/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 man cave & restoration garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $396/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave & Restoration Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave & Restoration Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave & Restoration Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave & Restoration Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage cost?

A 25×60 man cave & restoration garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $396/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 man cave & restoration garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave & restoration garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave & restoration garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $396/month on a 25×60 man cave & restoration garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 man cave & restoration garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 man cave & restoration garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×60 man cave & restoration garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave & restoration garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave & Restoration Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal barn with cupola, cream sectional door and stone accents among autumn trees

25×60 Man Cave & Restoration Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green steel structure with single slope roof and black sectional door in industrial yard

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay | Steel and Stud, From $21,250

12

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,200$21,250SAVE $2,950
or $443/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Light Manufacturing Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 25×60 light manufacturing bay? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders, cabinet shops, and small fabricators spec the 25×60 with 14-16 foot legs to clear a.

You’re viewing:Light Manufacturing Bay·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,250$24,200Save $2,950
or as low as $443/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$21,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12-GA Frame
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • Crane-Rated Framing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-LIGHT-MANUFACTURBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 25×60 light manufacturing bay? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Welders, cabinet shops, and small fabricators spec the 25×60 with 14-16 foot legs to clear a forklift mast and a 25×60 roll-up for material delivery.

💡 Pro tip:Crane-Rated Framing.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Light Manufacturing Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Light Manufacturing Bay spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Light Manufacturing Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday light manufacturing bay
Everyday light manufacturing bay
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a light manufacturing bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlight manufacturing bay + seasonal storage
light manufacturing bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$443/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 light manufacturing bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $443/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Light Manufacturing Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Light Manufacturing Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Light Manufacturing Bay also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Light Manufacturing Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 light manufacturing bay cost?

A 25×60 light manufacturing bay from Steel and Stud starts at $21,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $443/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 light manufacturing bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud light manufacturing bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 light manufacturing bay?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud light manufacturing bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 light manufacturing bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 light manufacturing bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 light manufacturing bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $443/month on a 25×60 light manufacturing bay.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 light manufacturing bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 light manufacturing bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×60 light manufacturing bay handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 25×60 light manufacturing bay ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Light Manufacturing Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$21,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green steel structure with single slope roof and black sectional door in industrial yard

25×60 Light Manufacturing Bay

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays | Steel and Stud, From $20,850

12

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,750$20,850SAVE $2,900
or $434/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Self-Storage Tenant Bays

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 25×60 self-storage tenant bays fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. The 24-foot depth gives renters real room for furniture, motorcycles, or seasonal.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Tenant Bays·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,850$23,750Save $2,900
or as low as $434/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$20,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Six 8×8 Roll-Ups
  • Vertical Roof
  • Permit-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-SELF-STORAGE-TENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your self-storage layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 25×60 self-storage tenant bays fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row AUnit row BHallway / Office25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · self-storage layout

Unit row A · Unit row B · Hallway / Office

Unit row A at the front, unit row b in the middle, hallway / office at the rear. The 24-foot depth gives renters real room for furniture, motorcycles, or seasonal inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Permit-Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Tenant Bays.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Tenant Bays spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Tenant Bays.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage tenant bays
Everyday self-storage tenant bays
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage tenant bays.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage tenant bays + seasonal storage
self-storage tenant bays + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$434/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 self-storage tenant bays is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $434/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Tenant Bays shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Tenant Bays · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Tenant Bays also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Tenant Bays questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays cost?

A 25×60 self-storage tenant bays from Steel and Stud starts at $20,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $434/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 self-storage tenant bays price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage tenant bays ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage tenant bays different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $434/month on a 25×60 self-storage tenant bays.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 self-storage tenant bays?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 self-storage tenant bays in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×60 self-storage tenant bays meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Tenant Bays quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

25×60 Self-Storage Tenant Bays

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building church with white cross, stone wainscot, glass doors, and monument sign

25×60 Church or Community Hall

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Church or Community Hall | Steel and Stud, From $20,950

12

25×60 Church or Community Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,900$20,950SAVE $2,950
or $436/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Church or Community Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Church or Community Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 25×60 church or community hall? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Rural congregations and civic groups use the 25×60 as a fellowship hall or covered.

You’re viewing:Church or Community Hall·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,950$23,900Save $2,950
or as low as $436/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$20,950
36×60
wider
$29,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Five 30×30 Windows
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-CHURCH-COMMUNITYBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your event-space layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Three-zone layout with kitchen/bar at one end. Looking for a 25×60 church or community hall? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Stage / FrontAudience seatingBAR + KITCHEN25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · event-space layout

Stage / Front · Audience seating · Bar + Kitchen

Stage / Front at the front, audience seating in the middle, bar + kitchen at the rear. Capacity: seats 125, standing 250. Rural congregations and civic groups use the 25×60 as a fellowship hall or covered event space with French doors at the front, 25×60 windows on three sides, and an open clear-span floor for tables and chairs.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified. Size affords: greenroom partition, commercial-grade kitchen rough-in, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Church or Community Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church or Community Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church or Community Hall spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church or Community Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday church or community hall
Everyday church or community hall
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church or community hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch or community hall + seasonal storage
church or community hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Church or Community Hall, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$436/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 church or community hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $436/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church or Community Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Church or Community Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Church or Community Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church or Community Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church or Community Hall also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church or Community Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 church or community hall cost?

A 25×60 church or community hall from Steel and Stud starts at $20,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $436/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 church or community hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church or community hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 church or community hall?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church or community hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 church or community hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 church or community hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 church or community hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $436/month on a 25×60 church or community hall.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 church or community hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 church or community hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×60 church or community hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church or Community Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$20,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building church with white cross, stone wainscot, glass doors, and monument sign

25×60 Church or Community Hall

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Ochre metal workshop with brown roll-up door in high desert foothills, steel building construction

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $19,000

12

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,650$19,000SAVE $2,650
or $396/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Detached Shop with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Our 25×60 detached shop with loft fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners who want a workshop downstairs and storage or a guest space.

You’re viewing:Detached Shop with Loft·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,000$21,650Save $2,650
or as low as $396/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered Mezzanine
  • 16′ Walls
  • 480 sq ft Loft
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-DETACHED-SHOP-LOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your detached shop with loft layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 25×60 detached shop with loft fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · detached shop with loft layout

Detached Shop with Loft layout.

Our 25×60 detached shop with loft fits 25-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners who want a workshop downstairs and storage or a guest space upstairs spec a 14-16 foot wall height with an engineered mezzanine over the rear 20 feet. That gives 1500 sq ft of loft space, leaves 1500 sq ft of full-height shop below, and uses the 25×60 footprint twice over.

💡 Pro tip:480 sq ft Loft.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Detached Shop with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Shop with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Shop with Loft spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Shop with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday detached shop with loft
Everyday detached shop with loft
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached shop with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached shop with loft + seasonal storage
detached shop with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$396/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 detached shop with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $396/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Shop with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Detached Shop with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Detached Shop with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Shop with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Shop with Loft also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🌾 25×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

25×60 livestock loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Shop with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 detached shop with loft cost?

A 25×60 detached shop with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $19,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $396/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 detached shop with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached shop with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 detached shop with loft?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached shop with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 detached shop with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 detached shop with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 detached shop with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $396/month on a 25×60 detached shop with loft.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 detached shop with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 detached shop with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×60 detached shop with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×60 detached shop with loft typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Shop with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Ochre metal workshop with brown roll-up door in high desert foothills, steel building construction

25×60 Detached Shop with Loft

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed | Steel and Stud, From $19,650

12

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,400$19,650SAVE $2,750
or $409/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×60Livestock Loafing Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 25×60 livestock loafing shed? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Cattle and goat operators run the 25×60 as a three-sided loafing shed with the open side facing.

You’re viewing:Livestock Loafing Shed·Size25×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,650$22,400Save $2,750
or as low as $409/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×60
25×60
this size
$19,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Three-Sided Open
  • Feed Room Partition
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X60-LIVESTOCK-LOAFINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

25 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 25×60 livestock loafing shed? At 1500 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Livestock areaCenter alleyFeed / Storage25′ × 60′ · 1,500 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Cattle and goat operators run the 25×60 as a three-sided loafing shed with the open side facing south to block north winter winds.

💡 Pro tip:Galvalume Roof.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Loafing Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Loafing Shed spec sheet.

Width25′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Loafing Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock loafing shed
Everyday livestock loafing shed
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock loafing shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock loafing shed + seasonal storage
livestock loafing shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed, what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$409/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×60 livestock loafing shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $409/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×60?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 60′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Loafing Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock Loafing Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Loafing Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

25×60 four-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 25×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

25×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →

🌾 25×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

25×60 horse barn with stalls configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →

🏡 25×60

Barndominium Shell

25×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 25×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

25×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →

🌾 25×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

25×60 hay & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →

🎯 25×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

25×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →

🏭 25×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

25×60 light manufacturing bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →

🏢 25×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

25×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →

🏛️ 25×60

Church or Community Hall

25×60 church or community hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Hall →

🏡 25×60

Detached Shop with Loft

25×60 detached shop with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Shop with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Loafing Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×60 livestock loafing shed cost?

A 25×60 livestock loafing shed from Steel and Stud starts at $19,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $409/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×60 livestock loafing shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock loafing shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×60 livestock loafing shed?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock loafing shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×60 livestock loafing shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×60 livestock loafing shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×60 livestock loafing shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $409/month on a 25×60 livestock loafing shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×60 livestock loafing shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×60 livestock loafing shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×60 livestock loafing shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Loafing Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

25×60 Livestock Loafing Shed

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×60 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel carport with long open span and white back panels near a lakeside lawn

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Metal Carport (Open) | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

12

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300
or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Metal Carport (Open)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), built for daily backyard use.

Our 26×50 metal carport (open) fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Open 26×50 steel carport for vehicles, trailers, boats, tractors, and.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport (Open)·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300
or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,495
  • 3 Roof Styles
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-METAL-CARPORT-OPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 26×50 metal carport (open) fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Cover bayPillar zoneApproach apron26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · open-cover layout

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Open 26×50 steel carport for vehicles, trailers, boats, tractors, and equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport (Open) at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport (Open).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport (Open) spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport (Open).

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport (open)
Everyday metal carport (open)
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport (open).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport (open) + seasonal storage
metal carport (open) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$343/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 metal carport (open) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport (Open) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport (Open) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport (Open) also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport (Open) questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 metal carport (open) cost?

A 26×50 metal carport (open) from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 metal carport (open) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport (open) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 metal carport (open)?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport (open) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 metal carport (open) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 metal carport (open) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 metal carport (open) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 metal carport (open).

What warranty comes with the 26×50 metal carport (open)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 metal carport (open) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 26×50 metal carport (open) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 metal carport (open) typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport (Open) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel carport with long open span and white back panels near a lakeside lawn

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door against sunset mountains

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

12

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300
or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Workshop / Hobby Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A 1,1300 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300
or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Looking for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. A 1,1300 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, fabrication, equipment repair, and hobby projects.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$343/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 26×50 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 workshop / hobby space typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with black wainscot and roll-up door against sunset mountains

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue prefab metal building with hip roof, awning windows, and white sectional door

26×50 Commercial Steel Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $18,300

12

26×50 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,850$18,300SAVE $2,550
or $381/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Commercial Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of code-compliant commercial steel building space. Ideal for small retail operations, service bays, office-storage combos, contractor shops, detailing bays, and inventory rooms. Code-certified.

You’re viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,300$20,850Save $2,550
or as low as $381/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$18,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”8,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial steel building layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of code-compliant commercial steel building space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · commercial steel building layout

Commercial Steel Building layout.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of code-compliant commercial steel building space. Ideal for small retail operations, service bays, office-storage combos, contractor shops, detailing bays, and inventory rooms. Code-certified options include 12-gauge framing and stamped drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Steel Building at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Commercial Steel Building, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$381/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $381/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 commercial steel building cost?

A 26×50 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $18,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $381/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 commercial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $381/month on a 26×50 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 26×50 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue prefab metal building with hip roof, awning windows, and white sectional door

26×50 Commercial Steel Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport shading a motorhome in the desert with mountains and cactus

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

12

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300
or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50RV Cover / Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 26×50 rv cover / boat storage fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Protect RVs, fifth wheels, travel trailers, boats, and toy haulers with.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Boat Storage·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300
or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From $9,995
  • Up to 16 Tall
  • 14 Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-RV-COVER-BOAT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Our 26×50 rv cover / boat storage fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. Protect RVs, fifth wheels, travel trailers, boats, and toy haulers with extra width for side access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover / boat storage
Everyday rv cover / boat storage
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$343/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 rv cover / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover / Boat Storage also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover / Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage cost?

A 26×50 rv cover / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 rv cover / boat storage typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel carport shading a motorhome in the desert with mountains and cactus

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure home gym with black roll-up door and glass corner entry showing weight racks

26×50 Home Gym / Studio

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

12

26×50 Home Gym / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300
or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Home Gym / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 26×50 home gym / studio fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Private 1,1300 sq ft fitness, dance, yoga, martial arts, or creative studio. Add.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300
or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 26×50 home gym / studio fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Cardio zoneWeight rackStretch / Bench26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · home-gym layout

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Private 1,1300 sq ft fitness, dance, yoga, martial arts, or creative studio.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym / studio
Everyday home gym / studio
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym / studio + seasonal storage
home gym / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$343/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym / Studio also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 home gym / studio cost?

A 26×50 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 home gym / studio?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 home gym / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 home gym / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 home gym / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 home gym / studio.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 home gym / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 26×50 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure home gym with black roll-up door and glass corner entry showing weight racks

26×50 Home Gym / Studio

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure hay barn at twilight with round bales glowing inside doorway

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) | Steel and Stud, From $17,100

12

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,500$17,100SAVE $2,400
or $356/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), built for farm and ranch demands.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of rugged metal barn (farm & ranch) space. Use 1,1300 sq ft for hay, feed, livestock shelter, tractors, implements, tack, and ranch supplies. Add lean-tos for extra covered space along one or.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,100$19,500Save $2,400
or as low as $356/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$17,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”2,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-METAL-BARN-FARM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of rugged metal barn (farm & ranch) space.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Use 1,1300 sq ft for hay, feed, livestock shelter, tractors, implements, tack, and ranch supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

DAILY USEEveryday metal barn (farm & ranch)
Everyday metal barn (farm & ranch)
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn (farm & ranch).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage
metal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$356/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $356/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) cost?

A 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) from Steel and Stud starts at $17,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $356/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $356/month on a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch).

What warranty comes with the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure hay barn at twilight with round bales glowing inside doorway

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building styled as a cottage with white French doors and flower window boxes

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

12

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300
or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Man Cave / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 26×50 man cave / she shed packs 1300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A spacious personal retreat for games, music, art, lounge seating, storage, and hobby.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300
or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 26×50 man cave / she shed packs 1300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. A spacious personal retreat for games, music, art, lounge seating, storage, and hobby equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$343/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 man cave / she shed cost?

A 26×50 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 26×50 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building styled as a cottage with white French doors and flower window boxes

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open roll-up door, welder at work, forklift, and steel stock

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $18,700

12

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,300$18,700SAVE $2,600
or $390/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Warehouse / Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of heavy-duty warehouse / equipment storage space. Store inventory, machinery, pallets, tools, vehicles, and jobsite equipment in a secure clear-span layout. Upgrade to 12-gauge framing for.

You’re viewing:Warehouse / Equipment Storage·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,700$21,300Save $2,600
or as low as $390/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$18,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”8,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-WAREHOUSE-EQUIPMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of heavy-duty warehouse / equipment storage space.

Loading areaINVENTORY RACKSOffice corner26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · small-business warehouse

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~26 pallet positions. Store inventory, machinery, pallets, tools, vehicles, and jobsite equipment in a secure clear-span layout.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / equipment storage
Everyday warehouse / equipment storage
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / equipment storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$390/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $390/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage cost?

A 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $18,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $390/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse / equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $390/month on a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open roll-up door, welder at work, forklift, and steel stock

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure at snowy dawn with a salt spreader truck in the lit bay

26×50 Government / Institutional

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Government / Institutional | Steel and Stud, From $18,400

12

26×50 Government / Institutional
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,000$18,400SAVE $2,600
or $383/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Government / Institutional

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Government / Institutional, engineered to code for assembly use.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of public-use government / institutional space. Useful for municipal equipment storage, emergency response staging, field offices, school storage, and community support buildings with.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,400$21,000Save $2,600
or as low as $383/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$18,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Fire Code
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your government / institutional layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of public-use government / institutional space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · government / institutional layout

Government / Institutional layout.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of public-use government / institutional space. Useful for municipal equipment storage, emergency response staging, field offices, school storage, and community support buildings with permit-ready engineering.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Government / Institutional in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional.

DAILY USEEveryday government / institutional
Everyday government / institutional
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgovernment / institutional + seasonal storage
government / institutional + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Government / Institutional, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$383/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 government / institutional is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $383/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Government / Institutional buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Government / Institutional

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Government / Institutional · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Government / Institutional also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Government / Institutional questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 government / institutional cost?

A 26×50 government / institutional from Steel and Stud starts at $18,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $383/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 government / institutional price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 government / institutional?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 government / institutional need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 government / institutional delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 government / institutional without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $383/month on a 26×50 government / institutional.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 government / institutional?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 government / institutional in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 26×50 government / institutional pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure at snowy dawn with a salt spreader truck in the lit bay

26×50 Government / Institutional

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building styled as a horse barn with dutch door, cupola, and goat in pasture

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building | Steel and Stud, From $17,100

12

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,500$17,100SAVE $2,400
or $356/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Equestrian / Tack Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 26×50 equestrian / tack building fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Store tack, hay, feed, grooming equipment, small tractors, and livestock.

You’re viewing:Equestrian / Tack Building·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,100$19,500Save $2,400
or as low as $356/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$17,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-EQUESTRIAN-TACK-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Our 26×50 equestrian / tack building fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

3 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Store tack, hay, feed, grooming equipment, small tractors, and livestock supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian / Tack Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian / Tack Building spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian / Tack Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian / tack building
Everyday equestrian / tack building
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian / tack building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian / tack building + seasonal storage
equestrian / tack building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$356/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 equestrian / tack building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $356/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian / Tack Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian / Tack Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian / Tack Building also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🏛️ 26×50

Houses of Worship / Community Space

26×50 houses of worship / community space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship / Community Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian / Tack Building questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 equestrian / tack building cost?

A 26×50 equestrian / tack building from Steel and Stud starts at $17,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $356/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 equestrian / tack building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 equestrian / tack building?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 equestrian / tack building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 equestrian / tack building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 equestrian / tack building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $356/month on a 26×50 equestrian / tack building.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 equestrian / tack building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 equestrian / tack building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 26×50 equestrian / tack building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian / Tack Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building styled as a horse barn with dutch door, cupola, and goat in pasture

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building event venue glowing at dusk with string lights and patio seating

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space | Steel and Stud, From $18,400

12

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,000$18,400SAVE $2,600
or $383/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings26×50Houses of Worship / Community Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

You’re viewing:Houses of Worship / Community Space·Size26×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,400$21,000Save $2,600
or as low as $383/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50
26×50
this size
$18,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,300 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-26X50-HOUSES-WORSHIP-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chapel layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Intimate sanctuary, single-aisle layout. Looking for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Altar / pulpitPew areaFOYER26′ × 50′ · 1,300 sq ft · chapel layout

Altar / pulpit · Pew area · Foyer

Altar / pulpit at the front, pew area in the middle, foyer at the rear. Capacity: seats ~130.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir stand, narthex.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Houses of Worship / Community Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Houses of Worship / Community Space spec sheet.

Width26′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Houses of Worship / Community Space.

DAILY USEEveryday houses of worship / community space
Everyday houses of worship / community space
1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a houses of worship / community space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhouses of worship / community space + seasonal storage
houses of worship / community space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$383/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 houses of worship / community space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $383/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Houses of Worship / Community Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Houses of Worship / Community Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$5,850+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Houses of Worship / Community Space also viewed:

🏡 26×50

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

26×50 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →

🏡 26×50

Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 26×50

Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 26×50

Commercial Steel Building

26×50 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 26×50

RV Cover / Boat Storage

26×50 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 26×50

Home Gym / Studio

26×50 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 26×50

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 26×50

Man Cave / She Shed

26×50 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 26×50

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

26×50 warehouse / equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Equipment Storage →

🏛️ 26×50

Government / Institutional

26×50 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 26×50

Equestrian / Tack Building

26×50 equestrian / tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Houses of Worship / Community Space questions, answered.

How much does a 26×50 houses of worship / community space cost?

A 26×50 houses of worship / community space from Steel and Stud starts at $18,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $383/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 houses of worship / community space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud houses of worship / community space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud houses of worship / community space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 houses of worship / community space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 houses of worship / community space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 houses of worship / community space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $383/month on a 26×50 houses of worship / community space.

What warranty comes with the 26×50 houses of worship / community space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 houses of worship / community space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 26×50 houses of worship / community space pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Houses of Worship / Community Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building event venue glowing at dusk with string lights and patio seating

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Orange steel carport with open front sheltering a pickup and SUV on a farm

28×30 Metal Carport

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

28×30 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Metal Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Metal Carport, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×30 metal carport packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open 28×30 carport for two vehicles, boats, ATVs, lawn equipment, or a compact RV. Add side panels.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,995
  • 3 Roof Styles
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×30 metal carport packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Cover bayPillar zoneApproach apron28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · open-cover layout

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Open 28×30 carport for two vehicles, boats, ATVs, lawn equipment, or a compact RV.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Metal Carport, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 metal carport cost?

A 28×30 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 metal carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 metal carport?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 28×30 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×30 metal carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 metal carport typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Orange steel carport with open front sheltering a pickup and SUV on a farm

28×30 Metal Carport

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Workshop / Hobby Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. 840 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto projects, welding, repairs, and.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,495
  • Clear Span
  • Insulation Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Looking for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. 840 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto projects, welding, repairs, and weekend hobbies.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 28×30 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 28×30 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 workshop / hobby space typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a hillside pasture

28×30 Commercial Storage Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Commercial Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,500

12

28×30 Commercial Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Commercial Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Commercial Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

28×30 delivers 840 sq ft of code-compliant commercial storage building space. Small business storage, contractor inventory, service tools, packaged goods, or shop overflow. Add certified engineering, 12-gauge framing.

You’re viewing:Commercial Storage Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”0,995
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-COMMERCIAL-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. 28×30 delivers 840 sq ft of code-compliant commercial storage building space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · commercial storage building layout

Commercial Storage Building layout.

28×30 delivers 840 sq ft of code-compliant commercial storage building space. Small business storage, contractor inventory, service tools, packaged goods, or shop overflow. Add certified engineering, 12-gauge framing, and commercial doors for permit-ready use.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Storage Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Commercial Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Storage Building spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial storage building
Everyday commercial storage building
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial storage building + seasonal storage
commercial storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Commercial Storage Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 commercial storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Commercial Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Commercial Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 commercial storage building cost?

A 28×30 commercial storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 commercial storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 commercial storage building?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 commercial storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 commercial storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 commercial storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 28×30 commercial storage building.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 commercial storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 commercial storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 28×30 commercial storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a hillside pasture

28×30 Commercial Storage Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan three bay metal garage storing an RV, boat and UTV near a mountain creek

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30RV Cover / Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 28×30 rv cover / boat storage fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Protect a travel trailer, boat, camper, work trailer, or tall vehicle with.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Boat Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,795
  • Up to 16 Tall
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-RV-COVER-BOAT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Our 28×30 rv cover / boat storage fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 26ft + 1 daily driver. Protect a travel trailer, boat, camper, work trailer, or tall vehicle with a 25-foot-wide cover.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover / boat storage
Everyday rv cover / boat storage
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 rv cover / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover / Boat Storage also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover / Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage cost?

A 28×30 rv cover / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 rv cover / boat storage typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan three bay metal garage storing an RV, boat and UTV near a mountain creek

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with three open vehicle bays sheltering trucks and a sports car lakeside

28×30 Home Gym / Studio

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

28×30 Home Gym / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Home Gym / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 28×30 home gym / studio fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Private 840 sq ft fitness, music, art, or hobby studio. Add insulation, windows.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,995
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Our 28×30 home gym / studio fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Cardio zoneWeight rackStretch / Bench28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · home-gym layout

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Private 840 sq ft fitness, music, art, or hobby studio.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym / studio
Everyday home gym / studio
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym / studio + seasonal storage
home gym / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym / Studio also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 home gym / studio cost?

A 28×30 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 home gym / studio?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 home gym / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 home gym / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 home gym / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 28×30 home gym / studio.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 home gym / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 28×30 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with three open vehicle bays sheltering trucks and a sports car lakeside

28×30 Home Gym / Studio

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Store tractors, mowers, hay, feed, ranch tools, tack, small implements, or livestock.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,295
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-METAL-BARN-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Store tractors, mowers, hay, feed, ranch tools, tack, small implements, or livestock supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barn / equipment shelter
Everyday metal barn / equipment shelter
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn / equipment shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barn / equipment shelter + seasonal storage
metal barn / equipment shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter cost?

A 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn / equipment shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn / equipment shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building with lit lounge interior behind French doors at dusk

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Man Cave / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×30 man cave / she shed packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Create a detached retreat for games, crafts, music, tools, or weekend projects. Insulation.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×30 man cave / she shed packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.Bath / Storage28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Create a detached retreat for games, crafts, music, tools, or weekend projects.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 man cave / she shed cost?

A 28×30 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 28×30 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 28×30 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building with lit lounge interior behind French doors at dusk

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green steel structure with single slope roof and black sectional door in industrial yard

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,900

12

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,700$12,900SAVE $1,800
or $269/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Shop / Light Industrial Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 28×30 shop / light industrial building packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Compact shop for equipment repair, fabrication, parts storage.

You’re viewing:Shop / Light Industrial Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,900$14,700Save $1,800
or as low as $269/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$12,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”0,995
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-SHOP-LIGHT-INDUSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shop / light industrial building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 28×30 shop / light industrial building packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · shop / light industrial building layout

Shop / Light Industrial Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 28×30 shop / light industrial building packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Compact shop for equipment repair, fabrication, parts storage, inventory staging, or light manufacturing. Upgrade to 12-gauge framing for heavier daily use.

💡 Pro tip:Shop / Light Industrial Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Shop / Light Industrial Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Shop / Light Industrial Building spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Shop / Light Industrial Building.

DAILY USEEveryday shop / light industrial building
Everyday shop / light industrial building
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a shop / light industrial building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshop / light industrial building + seasonal storage
shop / light industrial building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$269/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 shop / light industrial building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $269/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Shop / Light Industrial Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Shop / Light Industrial Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Shop / Light Industrial Building also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Shop / Light Industrial Building questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 shop / light industrial building cost?

A 28×30 shop / light industrial building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $269/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 shop / light industrial building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud shop / light industrial building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 shop / light industrial building?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud shop / light industrial building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 shop / light industrial building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 shop / light industrial building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 shop / light industrial building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $269/month on a 28×30 shop / light industrial building.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 shop / light industrial building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 shop / light industrial building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 28×30 shop / light industrial building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 28×30 shop / light industrial building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Shop / Light Industrial Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green steel structure with single slope roof and black sectional door in industrial yard

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

12

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750
or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Government / Institutional Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 28×30 government / institutional storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Municipal equipment storage, school maintenance shed, field office, emergency.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750
or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$12,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Fire Code
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your government / institutional storage layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 government / institutional storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · government / institutional storage layout

Government / Institutional Storage layout.

Looking for a 28×30 government / institutional storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Municipal equipment storage, school maintenance shed, field office, emergency supply building, or parks department storage with permit-ready engineering available.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional Storage at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday government / institutional storage
Everyday government / institutional storage
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgovernment / institutional storage + seasonal storage
government / institutional storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 government / institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Government / Institutional Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Government / Institutional Storage also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Government / Institutional Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 government / institutional storage cost?

A 28×30 government / institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 government / institutional storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 government / institutional storage?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 government / institutional storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 government / institutional storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 government / institutional storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $263/month on a 28×30 government / institutional storage.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 government / institutional storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 government / institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 28×30 government / institutional storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage in winter with a snowplow truck inside and salt spreader truck outside

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Prefab steel barn in tan with dutch doors and run-in horse shelter beside fenced pasture

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Tack Room / Feed Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Add ventilation and walk-in access for daily chores.

You’re viewing:Tack Room / Feed Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,995
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-TACK-ROOM-FEED-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Looking for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

1 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

1 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

1 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 1 horses + tack + feed. Add ventilation and walk-in access for daily chores.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tack Room / Feed Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tack Room / Feed Storage spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tack Room / Feed Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tack room / feed storage
Everyday tack room / feed storage
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tack room / feed storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtack room / feed storage + seasonal storage
tack room / feed storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 tack room / feed storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tack Room / Feed Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tack Room / Feed Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tack Room / Feed Storage also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🏛️ 28×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

28×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tack Room / Feed Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 tack room / feed storage cost?

A 28×30 tack room / feed storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 tack room / feed storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tack room / feed storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tack room / feed storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 tack room / feed storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 tack room / feed storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 tack room / feed storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 28×30 tack room / feed storage.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 tack room / feed storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 tack room / feed storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 28×30 tack room / feed storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tack Room / Feed Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Prefab steel barn in tan with dutch doors and run-in horse shelter beside fenced pasture

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure church with bell tower, rooftop cross, and fresh striped parking lot

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

12

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750
or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×30Community / Multi-Purpose Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

You’re viewing:Community / Multi-Purpose Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750
or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30
28×30
this size
$12,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X30-COMMUNITY-MULTI-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your community / multi-purpose building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE28′ × 30′ · 840 sq ft · community / multi-purpose building layout

Community / Multi-Purpose Building layout.

Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Multi-Purpose Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Multi-Purpose Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Multi-Purpose Building spec sheet.

Width28′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Multi-Purpose Building.

DAILY USEEveryday community / multi-purpose building
Everyday community / multi-purpose building
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / multi-purpose building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / multi-purpose building + seasonal storage
community / multi-purpose building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 community / multi-purpose building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Multi-Purpose Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Multi-Purpose Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,780+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Multi-Purpose Building also viewed:

🏡 28×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

28×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →

🏡 28×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

28×30 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 28×30

Metal Carport

28×30 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 28×30

Commercial Storage Building

28×30 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 28×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

28×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 28×30

Home Gym / Studio

28×30 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 28×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →

🎯 28×30

Man Cave / She Shed

28×30 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 28×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

28×30 shop / light industrial building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →

🏛️ 28×30

Government / Institutional Storage

28×30 government / institutional storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional Storage →

🌾 28×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

28×30 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Multi-Purpose Building questions, answered.

How much does a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building cost?

A 28×30 community / multi-purpose building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / multi-purpose building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / multi-purpose building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $263/month on a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building.

What warranty comes with the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Multi-Purpose Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure church with bell tower, rooftop cross, and fresh striped parking lot

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Olive green steel building garage at night with carriage door, string lights, and fire pit

28×32 Two-Car Garage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×32 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×32 Two-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

12

28×32 Two-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings28×32Two-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Two-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×32 two-car garage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. The most-quoted 28×32 metal garage configuration. Homeowners park two full-size pickups or SUVs.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Garage·Size28×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32
28×32
this size
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 896 sq ft enclosed
  • Dual 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X32-TWO-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×32 two-car garage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools28′ × 32′ · 896 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. The most-quoted 28×32 metal garage configuration.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Two-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
896 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width28′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space896 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car garage
Everyday two-car garage
896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car garage + seasonal storage
two-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Two-Car Garage, what makes it different.

896sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 two-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Two-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Two-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,032+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 28×32

Detached Workshop

28×32 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 28×32

RV Cover with Storage

28×32 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🌾 28×32

Equipment Shelter

28×32 equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Shelter →

🏡 28×32

Garage + Workshop Combo

28×32 garage + workshop combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Workshop Combo →

🌾 28×32

Horse Barn

28×32 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏢 28×32

Contractor Shop

28×32 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 28×32

Man Cave / She Shed

28×32 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🎯 28×32

Boat & Toy Storage

28×32 boat & toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Storage →

🏡 28×32

Detached Garage with Loft

28×32 detached garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Garage with Loft →

🌾 28×32

Hay & Feed Storage

28×32 hay & feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage →

🏢 28×32

Carport + Office

28×32 carport + office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport + Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 28×32 two-car garage cost?

A 28×32 two-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 two-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 two-car garage?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×32 two-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×32 two-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×32 two-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 28×32 two-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 28×32 two-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×32 two-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×32 two-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×32 two-car garage typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Olive green steel building garage at night with carriage door, string lights, and fire pit

28×32 Two-Car Garage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×32 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart